Owner's Manual

ManualsBrandsLG ManualsComputersLGH955

www.lg.com

MFL69119801 (1.0)

LG-H955

USER GUIDE

ﻲﺑﺮﻋ

ENGLISH

Summary of content (208 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ENGLISH USER GUIDE LG-H955 www.lg.com MFL69119801 (1.
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ (OS‬ﻭﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 4
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ‪6 .......................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪41...............................Google‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ‪16..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪42.......................‬‬ ‫‪42 ................................................... Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪43 ........................................... Bluetooth‬‬ ‫‪44 .......................................Wi-Fi Direct‬‬ ‫‪45 .......................................
PAGE 5
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪53......................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪53 .....................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ‪54 .......................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ‪54 ........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪55 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ‪55 ..................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪56 ........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪56 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪57...................
PAGE 6
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﺪ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﹰ ﺧﻄﺮﺍ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ .
PAGE 7
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﺪﻥ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 1.5‬ﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺎ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﹼﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻ ﹰ ًّ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﹸﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﺎ ﹰﺣﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﹼﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻟﺴﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗ ﹺﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .
PAGE 8
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﹼﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﺔ‪.
PAGE 9
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺠﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﹼﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻔﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻠﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﹼﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﺫﻥ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .
PAGE 10
‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻘﻠﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻻ ﹰ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺭﻛﹰﺎ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻏﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﹼﺐ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﻤﻌﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﹼﺿﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﻤﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺄﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺫﻧﻚ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻝ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗ ﹼﺘﺴﻢ ﺃﺟﻮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻔﺠﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﻟﺴﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ‪ LG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ‪LG‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺩﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪ .
PAGE 13
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ!‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ‪ GPL‬ﻭ ‪ LGPL‬ﻭ ‪ MPL‬ﻭﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪.http://opensource.lge.com‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻭﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺧﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺑﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ‪ LG Electronics‬ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 15
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺳﻴﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﱘ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﱘ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﲟﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺘﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﶈﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ!‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 17
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪ Gmail‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻴﺒﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 18
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ(‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ‪ +‬ﺯﺭ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﻬﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺮﹼﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﹰﺍ‪.
PAGE 19
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﹰﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫• ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﹼﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 20
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ‪ LED‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ LED‬ﻟﻺﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪/USB‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺴﺲ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪ .
PAGE 21
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪NFC‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫)ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻄﻮﻻ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪QuickMemo+‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻄﻮﻻ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪) NFC‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ(
PAGE 22
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ ‪USIM‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﹼ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ microSIM‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.
PAGE 23
‫‪ 3‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﲟﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ (1‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ )‪.(2‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻴﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ LG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﺒﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﻻ ﺗﺸﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ microSD‬ﺗﺼﻞ ﺳﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 32‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﹼﻌﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ FAT‬ﻭ‪ exFAT‬ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .
PAGE 25
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺮﹼﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ‪Smart Lock‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Smart Lock‬ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻹﺑﻘﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﹰ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻮﺛﻮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺄﻟﻮﻑ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ – ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ – ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺭﻓﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹰﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺭﻓﻌﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺳﺤﺐ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪ Google‬ﻟﺘﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﹰ ﻓﻮﺭﻳﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ < ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ < ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻛﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 7‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﹸﻌﻠﻤﻚ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﹼﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺭﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﹼﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﹼﻙ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﺰ‪ .
PAGE 32
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻺﺑﻼﻍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﹸﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺷﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ NFC‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻳﻤﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﻳﻤﺎﺀﺓ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ‪ .‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻔﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎﺀﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎﺀﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ( < ‪.‬‬ ‫<‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﹼﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺗﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺧﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻭﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .
PAGE 37
‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﹶ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﹶ ﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﹶ ﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﳌﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 38
‫‪QuickMemo+‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ QuickMemo+‬ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺷﺎﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.QuickMemo+‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺭﻓﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫)ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﺮﹼﺭﻩ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻤﺤﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺓ‪ .
PAGE 39
‫‪QSlide‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ‪.QSlide‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪Qslide‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪.QSlide‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﳌﺲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﺮﹼﺭﻩ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ < ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ QSlide‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪ QSlide‬ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ ،QSlide‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﺈﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 40
‫‪QuickRemote‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ‪ QuickRemote‬ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﺮﹼﺭﻩ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫< ﺃﺿﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ < < ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫<‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ( <‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪ Google‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪.Google‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻃﻠﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫<‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫)ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ( <‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ < ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ < ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ <‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )‪.(AP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫<‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ < ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻋﲔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﲟﺴﺢ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﹼ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ( <‬ ‫<ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯﹰﺍ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪.
PAGE 43
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ LG‬ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺛﻮﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﹰ‬ ‫• ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﻥ )ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ( <‬ ‫<‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ < ‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﻋﲔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.
PAGE 45
‫‪SmartShare‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ‪ SmartShare‬ﺑﺘﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪.LG‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ < ‪.SmartShare‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Play‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Beam‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Play‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻜ ﹼﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Beam‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ LG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ *‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ )‪.(MTP‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ LG Android Platform Driver‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻜﹼﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ )‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ .‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺭﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ "‪ "+‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺃﻭ ﲤﺮﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺮﹼﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ < ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺘﲔ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺳ ﹸﺘﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻒ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﹺ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ < ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ < ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﳌﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ < < ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﲔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﺩ ﹺﺧﻞ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‪ .‬ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﻘﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﺩﺛﺎﺗﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ .Gmail‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ POP3 :‬ﻭ‪ IMAP‬ﻭ‪.Exchange‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ < ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻠﻚ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪ .
PAGE 55
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫<‬ ‫< ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ( <‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ – ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ – ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ – ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ – ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ – ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻮﻝ ‪ LG‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Cheese‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ ،Smile‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﹼﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭ ﹼﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﹼﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻠﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ‪ (Bluetooth‬ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ MMS‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ( < ‪.‬‬ ‫<‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ < ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺳ ﹶﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﻀﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻃﺮﻓﹶﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﹶ‬ ‫ﹶ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻑ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ؛ ﻓﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﹴ‬ ‫ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ < < ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ( <‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜ ﹼﺒﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪Download‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .
PAGE 62
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ( <‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﳌﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻺﺭﺟﺎﻉ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ QSlide‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.SmartShare‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛـ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜ ﹼﺒﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺰﻭﹼﺩﹰﺍ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﹼﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﹼﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﹼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ < < ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ( <‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ( <‬ ‫<‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺰﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺰﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺰﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﹼﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ < < ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ( < ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻬﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻛﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫< ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ( <‬ ‫<‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫<ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ( < ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪< Google‬‬ ‫<‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﹸﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﲢﺪﺙ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫<ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ( <‬ ‫<‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 70
‫‪LG SmartWorld‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻮﻗﺔ – ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘ ﹼﺪﻡ ‪ LG SmartWorld‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ LG SmartWorld‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬ ‫<ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ( < ‪.‬‬ ‫<‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻠﺖ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﹼ‬ ‫ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺘﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﻔﹼﺢ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﹸﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ﻭﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ‪ -‬ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫<‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ( <‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﹼﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫< ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .‬ﻗﹸﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﹸﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺈﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫< ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.
PAGE 73
‫‪Chrome‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ Chrome‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ < < ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ( <‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ‪ ،Chrome‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ < ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﹼﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻤﺤﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ < ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ ‪-‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ < < ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ( <‬ ‫< ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫> ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ <‬ ‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 75
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺭﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ – ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻔﻴ ﹰﺪﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺭﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ – ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺩ ﺁﻟﻲ – ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 76
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫)ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺎ ﻇﻬﺮﹰﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﺮ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﹶﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ - SmartShare Beam‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪.LG‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ – ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.DLNA‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ – Miracast‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺻﻮﺗﻪ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ Miracast dongle‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫> ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ <‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺯﻋﺎﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻤﻼﺀﻣﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ ﻭﺑﻴﺌﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ <‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ <‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻴﻬﺘﺰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 79
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ – Smart Bulletin‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ Smart Bulletin‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ .‬ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ LG Health‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Smart Tips‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺔ – ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪LG‬‬ ‫‪.SmartWorld‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ – ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 80
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ – ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮﺩ – ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎﺀ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﻏﻼﻕ – ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻔﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ – ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺮﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ <‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻼﺷﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﻘﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﻘﻈﺔ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﺎﻛﻨﹰﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺤﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 82
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ – ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ – ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ )ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﻲﺀ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ(‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ – ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )‪ (GPS‬ﻭ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.
PAGE 83
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ – LG‬ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻟﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ – ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ PIN‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ – ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 84
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ – ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻔﹼﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ – ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ – Trust agents‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ Trust agents‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ <‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻤﺎﺋﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ – ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺫﻧﻚ ﻟﻠﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴﺎ – ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫• ﺧﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴﺎ‪.
PAGE 85
‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ – ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ <‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫• ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ – ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ – ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻲ ‪ -‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪.Google‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ – ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻚ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )‪(LG PC Suite‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ‪ LG PC Suite‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،LG PC Suite‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪...‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ )ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ( ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪LG PC Suite‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪Windows XP (Service pack 3) 32bit, Windows Vista,:‬‬ ‫‪Windows 7, Windows 8‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ )‪ :(CPU‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ )‪ (RAM‬ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ‪ 512‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ‪ ،768 x 1024‬ﻭﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ 32‬ﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 500‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻨﺎ ﹰﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪(.
PAGE 89
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪LG PC Suite‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،LG PC Suite‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.www.lg.com‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ < ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﶈﻤﻮﻝ < ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺮﹼﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ < ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Mac OS‬‬ ‫< ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪.LG PC Suite‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪LG PC Suite‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ (10.6.
PAGE 90
‫ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪LG‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪.http://www.lg.com/common/index.jsp‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ‪ LG‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ -‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪ Google‬ﻭﺃﻱ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﻭﺃﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ - (DRM‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ‪ LG‬ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ LG‬ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ‪.
PAGE 92
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪92‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﻣﻮﻓﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪ LG‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.www.lg.
PAGE 93
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ LG‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ LG‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.LG Electronics‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DivX HD‬‬ ‫®‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺘﺎﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ DivX Certified‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.DivX®video‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .vod.divx.com‬ﺍﻋﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪DivX‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ DivX VOD‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪) .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪(.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‬ ‫• ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫• ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫• ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ ‪USIM‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ USIM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬ ﹼﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪96‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺮﹼﺡ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ USIM‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﻮﻉ ﻣﻘﺪ ﹰﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪.PIN2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﺮﻫﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ‪.
PAGE 97
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬ ﹼﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪ /‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﺗﻠﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻄﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬ ‫‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫‪Bluetooth‬؟‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﹺﻋ ﹼﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﻸﺳﻤﺎﺀ؟‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭ ™‪.Gmail‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻊ ‪Gmail‬؟‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻫﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 99
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻲ؟‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ‪ Gmail‬ﻭﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪MS‬‬ ‫‪) Exchange‬ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺔ( ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻘﻠﺖ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﹰﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻫﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪VPN‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻓﺸﻠﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻫﻞ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ؟‪ .‬ﹸ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻓﻌﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﺊ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﹼ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻭﻟﻢ ﺃﻧﺸﺊ‬ ‫‪ Google‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﻴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ؟ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻭﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪15‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ < ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ؟‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨ ﹼﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ؟‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻛﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﻴﻦ < ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨ ﹼﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻤﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﺃﻡ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻻ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.
PAGE 103
User Guide ENGLISH Some content and illustrations may differ from your device depending on the region, service provider, software version, or OS version, and are subject to change without prior notice. • Always use genuine LG accessories. The supplied items are designed only for this device and may not be compatible with other devices. • Available accessories may vary depending on your region, country or service provider.
PAGE 104
Table of contents Guidelines for safe and efficient use........4 Google account setup..............................40 Important notice......................................15 Connecting to Networks and Devices.....41 Wi-Fi......................................................41 Bluetooth................................................42 Wi-Fi Direct............................................43 SmartShare............................................44 Transferring data between a PC and your device........
PAGE 105
E-mail.......................................................52 Managing email accounts.......................52 Working with account folders..................52 Composing and sending email................53 Camera and Video....................................54 Camera options on the viewfinder...........54 Using the advanced settings...................55 Taking a photo .......................................55 Once you have taken a photo..................56 Recording a video................................
PAGE 106
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. Should a fault occur, a software tool is built into your device that will gather a fault log. This tool gathers only data specific to the fault, such as signal strength, cell ID position in sudden call drop and applications loaded. The log is used only to help determine the cause of the fault.
PAGE 107
• This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 cm away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not contain metal and should position the product at least 1.5 cm away from your body. In order to transmit data files or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network.
PAGE 108
Do not disassemble this unit. Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required. • Repairs under warranty, at LG's discretion, may include replacement parts or boards that are either new or reconditioned, provided that they have functionality equal to that of the parts being replaced. • Keep away from electrical appliances such as TVs, radios and personal computers. • The unit should be kept away from heat sources such as radiators or cookers. • Do not drop.
PAGE 109
Do not use, touch or attempt to remove or fix broken, chipped or cracked glass. Damage to the glass display due to abuse or misuse is not covered under the warranty. • Your phone is an electronic device that generates heat during normal operation. Extremely prolonged, direct skin contact in the absence of adequate ventilation may result in discomfort or minor burns. Therefore, use care when handling your phone and charger (fast charger) during or immediately after operation.
PAGE 110
Road safety Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile phones in the area when you drive. • Do not use a hand-held phone while driving. • Give full attention to driving. • Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. • RF energy may affect some electronic systems in your vehicle such as car stereos and safety equipment. • When your vehicle is equipped with an air bag, do not obstruct with installed or portable wireless equipment.
PAGE 111
NOTE: Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. Glass Parts Some parts of your mobile device are made of glass. This glass could break if your mobile device is dropped on a hard surface or receives a substantial impact. If the glass breaks, do not touch or attempt to remove it. Stop using your mobile device until the glass is replaced by an authorised service provider. Blasting area Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress.
PAGE 112
Children Keep the phone in a safe place out of the reach of small children. It includes small parts which may cause a choking hazard if detached. Emergency calls Emergency calls may not be available on all mobile networks. Therefore you should never depend solely on your phone for emergency calls. Check with your local service provider. Battery information and care You do not need to completely discharge the battery before recharging.
PAGE 113
Actual battery life will depend on network configuration, product settings, usage patterns, battery and environmental conditions. • Make sure that no sharp-edged items such as animal’s teeth or nails, come into contact with the battery. This could cause a fire. • For your safety, do not remove the battery incorporated in the product. • Do not leave the phone in hot or cold places, as this may deteriorate phone performance. • Do not replace the battery by yourself.
PAGE 114
Laser safety statement Caution! This product employs a laser system. To ensure proper use of this product, please read this owner's manual carefully and retain for future reference. Should the unit require maintenance, contact an authorized service center. Use of controls, adjustments, or the performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To prevent direct exposure to laser beam, do not try to open the enclosure or make direct contact with the laser.
PAGE 115
Open Source Software Notice Information To obtain the source code under GPL, LGPL, MPL, and other open source licenses, that is contained in this product, please visit http://opensource.lge.com. In addition to the source code, all referred license terms, warranty disclaimers and copyright notices are available for download.
PAGE 116
Disposal of your old appliance 1 All electrical and electronic products should be disposed of separately from the municipal waste stream via designated collection facilities appointed by the government or the local authorities. 2 The correct disposal of your old appliance will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health.
PAGE 117
Important notice Please read this before you start using your phone! Please check to see whether any problems you encountered with your phone are described in this section before taking the phone in for service or calling a service representative. 1. Phone memory When there is less than 10MB of space available in your phone memory, your phone cannot receive new messages. You must check your phone memory and delete some data, such as applications or messages, to make more memory available.
PAGE 118
• • Reduce screen brightness and set a shorter screen timeout. Turn off automatic syncing for Gmail, Calendar, Contacts and other applications. NOTE: • Some applications you download may consume battery power. • While using downloaded applications, check the battery charge level. NOTE: If you accidently press the Power/Lock Button while the device is in your pocket, the screen will turn off automatically in order to save battery power. 3.
PAGE 119
4. Using the Hard Reset (Factory Reset) If your phone needs to be restored to its original settings and condition, use a Hard Reset (Factory Reset). 1 Turn the power off. 2 Press and hold the Power/Lock Button + Volume Down Button on the back of the phone. 3 Release the Power/Lock Button only when the boot logo is displayed, then immediately press and hold the Power/Lock Button again. 4 Release all Buttons when the Factory hard reset screen is displayed.
PAGE 120
5. Opening and switching applications Multitasking is easy with Android; you can keep more than one application running at the same time. There is no need to quit an application before opening another. Use and switch between several open applications. Android manages each application, stopping and starting them as needed to make sure that idle applications don't consume resources unnecessarily. 1 Tap . App previews of recently used applications will be displayed. 2 Tap the application you want to access.
PAGE 121
Getting to know your phone Phone layout Infrared LED Notification LED Front Camera Lens Microphone Headset Jack Microphone Earpiece Proximity Sensor Touch Screen Charger/USB port NOTE: Proximity sensor When receiving and making calls, the proximity sensor automatically turns the backlight off and locks the touch screen by sensing when the phone is near your ear. This extends battery life and prevents you from unintentionally activating the touch screen during calls.
PAGE 122
Laser Detection AutoFocus Power/Lock Button NFC Touch Point Rear Camera Lens Flash Volume Buttons Speaker Power/Lock Button Volume Buttons • • Turn your phone on/off by pressing and holding this button Short press to lock/unlock the screen (While screen is off) • Long press the Up key to launch QuickMemo+ • Long press the Down key to launch Camera WARNING Be careful not to damage the NFC touch point on the phone, as this is part of the NFC antenna.
PAGE 123
Installing the SIM or USIM card Before you can start exploring your new phone, you need to set it up. 1 To remove the back cover, hold the phone firmly in one hand. With your other hand, lift off the back cover with your thumbnail as shown in the figure below. 2 Slide the SIM card into the lower slot for the SIM card as shown in the figure. Make sure the gold contact area on the card is facing downward. NOTE: Only the microSIM cards work with the device.
PAGE 124
3 To replace the cover onto the device, align the back cover over the battery compartment (1) and press it down until it clicks into place (2). Charging the phone Charge the battery before using it for first time. Use the charger to charge the battery. WARNING Use only LG-approved chargers, batteries and cables.
PAGE 125
NOTE: Do not open the back cover while your phone is charging. Inserting a memory card Your device supports up to a 32 GB microSD card. Depending on the memory card manufacturer and type, some memory cards may not be compatible with your device. WARNING Some memory cards may not be fully compatible with the device. Using an incompatible card may damage the device or the memory card, or corrupt the data stored in it. NOTE: • The device supports the FAT and the exFAT file systems for memory cards.
PAGE 126
Unlocking the screen By default, your screen will lock after a period of inactivity, then turn off. Unlocking the screen 1 Press the Power/Lock Button or double-tap on the screen. 2 Swipe the screen in any direction to unlock it. TIP! Smart Lock You can use Smart Lock to make unlocking your phone easier. You can set it to keep your phone unlocked when you have a trusted Bluetooth device connected to it, when it's in a familiar location like your home or work, or when it recognises your face.
PAGE 127
Your Home screen Touch screen tips Here are some tips on how to navigate on your phone. • Tap or touch – A single finger tap selects items, links, shortcuts and letters on the on-screen keyboard. • Touch and hold – Touch and hold an item on the screen by tapping it and not lifting your finger until an action occurs. • Drag – Touch and hold an item for a moment and then, without lifting your finger, move your finger on the screen until you reach the target position.
PAGE 128
Home screen The Home screen is the starting point for many applications and functions. It allows you to add items like app shortcuts and Google widgets to give you instant access to information and applications. This is the default canvas and accessible from any menu by tapping . Status Bar Widget Application Icons Location Indicator Quick Key Area Home touch keys Shows phone’s status information, including the time, signal strength, battery status and notification icons.
PAGE 129
Back Key Returns to the previous screen. Also closes pop-up items, such as menus, dialog boxes and the on-screen keyboard. Touch and hold it to access the Dual window. Return to the Home screen from any screen. Home Key Recent Key Displays recently used applications. If you touch and hold this key, it opens a menu of available options. Extended Home screen The operating system provides multiple Home screen canvases to provide more space for adding icons, widgets and more.
PAGE 130
Removing an item from the Home screen • Home screen > Touch and hold the icon you want to remove > drag it to . Adding an app as a Quick key • From the Apps menu or on the Home screen, touch and hold an application icon and drag it to the Quick key area. Up to 7 apps can be added. Removing an app from the Quick key area • Touch and hold the desired quick key and drag it to NOTE: . Apps Key cannot be removed.
PAGE 131
Notifications panel Notifications alert you to the arrival of new messages, calendar events and alarms, as well as ongoing events, such as when you are using turn-by-turn navigation. When a notification arrives, its icon appears at the top of the screen. Icons for pending notifications appear on the left, and system icons, such as Wi-Fi and battery strength shown on the right. NOTE: The available options may vary depending on the region or service provider.
PAGE 132
Opening the Notifications panel Swipe down from the Status bar to open the Notifications panel. To close the Notifications panel, touch and drag the screen toward the top of the screen. Quick Toggle Area Notifications Clear Tap each quick toggle key to turn it on/off. Touch and hold the key to access the settings menu for the function. To see more toggle keys, swipe left or right. Tap to remove, add or rearrange toggle keys. Current notifications are listed, each with a brief description.
PAGE 133
Indicator icons on the Status Bar Indicator icons appear on the Status bar at the top of the screen to report missed calls, new messages, calendar events, device status and more. The icons displayed at the top of the screen provide information about the status of the device. The icons listed in the table below are some of the most common ones.
PAGE 134
New text or multimedia message Media server content sharing is on NFC is on Wi-Fi hotspot is active NOTE: The icon's location in the Status bar may differ according to the function or service. On-screen keyboard You can enter text using the on-screen keyboard. The on-screen keyboard appears on the screen when you tap an available text entry field. Using the keypad and entering text Tap once to capitalize the next letter you type. Tap twice for all caps. Tap to access the keyboard's Settings menu.
PAGE 135
Special Features Gesture shot Take a picture with a hand gesture. To take a photo, raise your hand until the front camera detects it and a box appears on the screen. OR Glance View When the phone screen is off, you can see the Status bar, time and date by dragging your finger down on the screen.
PAGE 136
Gesture View After taking a photo with the front camera lens, you can automatically check the captured photo with this gesture. 1 Tap > > Apps tab (if necessary) > . 2 Take a picture with the front camera. 3 After taking the picture, bring the phone close to your face. The captured photo will be displayed. Taking a picture Quick preview Returning front camera mode NOTE: • Depends on the speed and angle of the gesture, this feature may not work properly.
PAGE 137
KnockON You can wake up, or turn off, the screen as easily as double-tapping the screen. While the screen is off, and idle, double-tap the center screen quickly to wake the screen. To turn the screen off, double-tap the Status bar in any screen (except on the camera viewfinder) or empty area on the Home screen. NOTE: When using KnockOn to wake the screen, make sure you do not cover the proximity sensor. Doing so will prevent the screen from turning on.
PAGE 138
Dual window This feature allows you to multi-task by splitting up the screen into two, allowing you to use two compatible applications at the same time. 1 Touch and hold the to split the screen. 2 Tap or drag the app icon for the corresponding application you wish to use. : Tap to view the Dual window menu options, or drag to resize the split screens. : Switch two screens. : View the app list. : Change the selected window to full screen. : Close the currently selected app window.
PAGE 139
QuickMemo+ The QuickMemo+ feature allows you to create memos and capture screen shots. Capture screens, draw on them and share them with family and friends with QuickMemo+. 1 (While screen is off) Press and hold the Volume Up button. OR OR (While the screen is on) Touch and slide the Status bar downward and tap . 2 Use the menu to select from the available options Pen type, Color, Eraser and create a memo. 3 Tap to save the memo. To exit QuickMemo+ at any time, tap .
PAGE 140
QSlide From any screen, use the Notification panel to easily access and use the Notepad, Calendar, Calculator, and more with QSlide. OR Tap to expand the window to full window size. Tap to adjust the window's transparency. Tap to close the QSlide window. Drag to adjust the size. 1 Touch and slide the status bar downward > tap QSlide to view the available QSlide apps. Also, while using applications that support QSlide, tap . The function is displayed as a small window on your screen.
PAGE 141
QuickRemote QuickRemote turns your phone into a Universal Remote for your home TV, set-top box and audio system, and more. Set up 1 Touch and slide the Status bar downward and tap > ADD REMOTE. OR Tap > > Apps tab (if necessary) > > tap . 2 Select the type and brand of the device, then follow the on-screen instructions to configure the device. Access your QuickRemote 3 Once you have completed the initial set up, you can easily access the QuickRemote from the Notification panel.
PAGE 142
Google account setup When you first turn on your phone, you have the opportunity to sign into your Google Account and select how you want to use certain Google services. Setting up your Google account During the initial boot up of your device, ensure your device is connected to the Web. Then, sign into a Google Account from the prompted set-up screen. OR • After having exited the Startup Wizard, tap > > > General > Accounts & sync > Add Account > Google.
PAGE 143
Connecting to Networks and Devices Wi-Fi You can use high-speed Internet access while within the coverage of the wireless access point (AP). Connecting to Wi-Fi networks 1 Tap > > Apps tab (if necessary) > > Networks tab > Wi-Fi. 2 Set Wi-Fi to ON to turn Wi-Fi on and start scanning for available Wi-Fi networks. 3 Tap a network to connect to it. • If the network is secured with a lock icon, you will need to enter a security key or password. NOTE: The Status bar displays icons that indicate Wi-Fi status.
PAGE 144
Bluetooth You can use Bluetooth to connect with headsets, sound systems, or even to exchange data between near devices. NOTE: • LG is not responsible for the loss, interception or misuse of data sent or received via the Bluetooth feature. • Always ensure that you share and receive data with devices that are trusted and properly secured. • If there are obstacles between the devices, the operating distance may be reduced.
PAGE 145
Sending data via Bluetooth 1 Using an application that supports sharing, locate the data, or file, that you want to share. 2 Select the Share option. 3 Select Bluetooth. 4 Select the paired Bluetooth device (or pair with a new device). NOTE: The method for selecting an option may vary by data type. Receiving data via Bluetooth 1 Tap > > Apps tab (if necessary) > > Networks tab > Bluetooth. 2 Set Bluetooth to ON to turn it on. 3 You will receive a request to accept a pairing attempt from the sending device.
PAGE 146
SmartShare SmartShare allows you to receive multimedia content via LG phone and tablets. 1 While viewing the content you want to share, tap or > SmartShare. 2 Tap Play or Beam in the pop-up that is displayed. • Play: You can stream your content via a TV, Bluetooth speaker, etc. • Beam: You can send your content to Bluetooth devices or via SmartShare Beam* to supported LG phones or tablets. *SmartShare Beam quickly transfers multimedia contents through Wi-Fi Direct.
PAGE 147
Transferring data between a PC and your device You can copy or move data between a PC and the device. Transferring data 1 Connect your device to a PC using the USB cable that came with your phone. 2 Open the Notifications panel and select Media device (MTP). 3 A window will pop-up on your PC, allowing you to transfer the desired data. NOTE: • The LG Android Platform Driver is required to be installed on your PC to be able to detect the phone. • Check the requirements for using Media device (MTP).
PAGE 148
Calls Making a call 1 2 3 4 Tap to open the dialer. Enter the number using the dialer. To delete a digit, tap . After entering the desired number, tap to place the call. To end the call, tap . TIP! To enter "+" to make international calls, touch and hold . Calling your contacts 1 Tap to open your contacts. 2 Scroll through the contact list. You can also enter the contact's name in the Search field or scroll along the alphabet letters on the right edge of the screen.
PAGE 149
Making a second call 1 During your first call, tap > Add call. 2 Enter the number and tap to place the call. 3 Both calls are displayed on the call screen. Your initial call is locked and put on hold. 4 To toggle between numbers, tap the number displayed on the screen. You can also tap to start a conference call. 5 To end all calls, tap End. NOTE: You are charged for each call you make. Viewing your call logs On the Home screen, tap and select Call logs tab.
PAGE 150
Contacts Add contacts to your phone and synchronize them with the contacts in your Google account or other accounts that support contact syncing. Searching for a contact 1 Tap to open your contacts. 2 Tap Search contacts and enter the contact name using the keyboard. You can also scroll along the alphabet letters on the right edge of the screen. Adding a new contact 1 Tap and enter the new contact's number. 2 Tap > Add to Contacts > New contact.
PAGE 151
Removing a contact from your favorites list 1 Tap to open your contacts. 2 Tap the Favorites tab and choose a contact to view its details. 3 Tap the yellow star at the top right corner of the screen. The star turns grey color and the contact is removed from your favorites. Creating a group 1 Tap to open your contacts. 2 Tap Groups > > New group. 3 Enter a name for the new group. You can also set a distinct ringtone for the group. 4 Tap Save to save the group.
PAGE 152
Messaging Your phone combines text and multimedia messages into one intuitive, easy-to-use menu. Sending a message 1 Tap on the Home screen and tap to create a new message. 2 Enter a contact name or contact number into the To field. As you enter the contact name, matching contacts appear. You can tap a suggested recipient and add more than one contact. NOTE: You may be charged for each text message you send. Please consult with your service provider.
PAGE 153
Conversation view Text and multimedia messages exchanged with another party are displayed in chronological order so that you can conveniently see and find your conversations. Changing message settings Your phone's messaging settings are predefined to allow you to send messages immediately. You can change the settings based on your preferences. • Open the Messaging app and tap > Settings.
PAGE 154
E-mail You can use the E-mail application to read emails from services like Gmail. The E-mail application supports the following account types: POP3, IMAP and Exchange. Your service provider or system administrator can provide you with the account settings you need. Managing email accounts The first time you open the E-mail application, a setup wizard opens to help you set up an email account. After the initial setup, the Email app displays the contents of your inbox.
PAGE 155
Composing and sending email Composing and sending messages 1 While in the application, tap to create a new email. 2 Enter an address for the email's intended recipient. As you enter text, matching addresses are proposed from your Contacts. Separate multiple addresses using semicolons. 3 Tap to add a Cc/Bcc and tap to attach files, if required. 4 Enter the email's text. 5 Tap to send the email.
PAGE 156
Camera and Video To open the Camera application, tap > > Apps tab (if necessary) > . Camera options on the viewfinder 1 2 6 7 3 8 4 5 9 Hide/Display Options – Tap to hide/display the camera options on the viewfinder. Flash – Allows you to manage the camera's flash. Choose from Off , On , Auto . Swap camera – Tap to swap between the rear camera and the front camera. Shot mode – Allows you to select the shot mode for the picture. Choose from Auto, Panorama or Dual.
PAGE 157
Using the advanced settings In the camera viewfinder, tap to access the camera settings below. Combines photos taken at multiple exposures into one optimal photo to get a better photo in difficult lighting situations. Selects the photo resolution. Allows you to say a voice command to take pictures. You can say LG, Cheese, Smile, etc. Sets a delay after the capture key is pressed. This is ideal if you want to be in the photo or video. Displays grid lines to help you align your pictures and videos.
PAGE 158
Once you have taken a photo Tap the image thumbnail at the bottom of the Camera screen to view the last photo you took. The following options are available. Tap to edit the photo. Tap to take another photo immediately. Tap to send your photo to others or share it in via any available social network services. Tap to delete the photo. Tap to access additional options. Tap to add the photo to your favorites.
PAGE 159
After recording a video In the viewfinder, tap the video thumbnail at the top of the screen to view the last video you recorded. The following options are available. Tap to record another video immediately. Tap to open the available sharing options (such as Messaging or Bluetooth) to share. Tap to delete the video. Tap to access additional options. Tap to add the video to favourites. NOTE: Additional charges may apply when MMS messages are downloaded while roaming.
PAGE 160
5 Make sure that the focus area aligns with the blue guideline while taking the photo. 6 Tap to stop taking the panoramic picture. Dual The Dual feature allows you to take a picture or record video with the front and rear cameras at the same time. 1 Tap > > Apps tab (if necessary) > . 2 Tap MODE > . NOTE: Drag the small screen to move it to your desired location. Touch and hold the small screen to resize it. Tap on the small screen to alternate between the two cameras. 3 Tap to stop dual recording.
PAGE 161
Live Zoom Live Zoom allows you to zoom in or out on a portion of a video that is being played to make the desired section appear larger or smaller. When viewing a video, use your index finger and thumb in a pinching or spreading motion to zoom in or out. NOTE: Do not press too hard; the touch screen is sensitive enough to pick up a light, but firm touch. Dual Play Dual Play (wired or wireless connection to two displays) can be run on a different screen.
PAGE 162
Gallery The Gallery allows you to view and manage all of your pictures and videos. • Tap > > Apps tab (if necessary) > . NOTE: • Depending on the software installed, some file formats may not be supported. • Some files may not play properly due to their encoding. Viewing pictures The Gallery displays your pictures in folders. When an application, such as E-mail, saves a picture, the download folder is automatically created to contain the picture.
PAGE 163
Playing videos 1 Touch > Apps tab (if necessary) > 2 Select the video you want to watch. The following options are available. / . Touch to pause/resume video playback. Touch to fast-forward 10 seconds. Touch to rewind 10 seconds. Touch to adjust the video volume. Touch to lock/unlock the screen. Touch to rotate the screen. Touch to use QSlide for the Videos app. Tap to share your video using the SmartShare function. Tap to access additional options.
PAGE 164
Editing photos While viewing a photo, tap . Deleting photos/videos Use one of the following methods: • While in a folder, tap , select the photos/videos and then tap Delete. • While viewing a photo, tap . Setting wallpaper While viewing a photo, tap it to a contact. > Set image as to set the image as wallpaper or assign NOTE: • Depending on the software installed, some file formats may not be supported. • If the file size exceeds the available memory, an error can occur when youopen files.
PAGE 165
Multimedia Music Your phone has a music player that lets you play all your favorite tracks. To access the music player, tap > > Apps tab (if necessary) > . Playing a song 1 Tap > > Apps tab (if necessary) > 2 Tap the Songs tab. 3 Select the song you want to play. 4 The following options are available. . Tap to pause playback. Tap to resume playback. Tap to skip to the next track in the album, playlist or shuffle list. Touch and hold to fast-forward.
PAGE 166
Tap to restart the current track or skip to the previous track in the album, playlist or shuffle list. Touch and hold to rewind. Tap to adjust the volume. Tap to set audio effects. Tap to play the current playlist in shuffle mode (tracks are played in random order). Tap to toggle through repeat all songs, repeat current song and repeat off. Tap to share your music using the SmartShare function. Tap to add the song to your favorites. Tap to open the current playlist. Tap to access additional options.
PAGE 167
Utilities Clock Use the Clock app gives you access to the Alarms, Timer, World clock and Stopwatch functions. Access these functions by tapping the tabs across the top of the screen or swiping horizontally across the screen. Tap > > Apps tab (if necessary) > . Alarm The Alarms tab allows you to set alarms. 1 Open the Clock app, then select the Alarm tab. 2 Tap the New alarm icon to add an alarm. 3 Adjust the settings as necessary and tap Save. NOTE: You can also tap an existing alarm to edit it.
PAGE 168
Stopwatch The Stopwatch tab allows you to use your phone as a stopwatch. 1 Open the Clock app, then select the Stopwatch tab. 2 Tap the Start key to initiate the stopwatch. NOTE: Tap the Lap key to record lap times. 3 Tap the Stop button to stop stopwatch. NOTE: To reset the stopwatch, tap the Reset button. You can also tap the Resume button to resume the stopwatch. Calculator The Calculator app allows you to perform mathematical calculations using a standard or scientific calculator.
PAGE 169
Voice Recorder The Voice Recorder app records audible files for you to use in a variety of ways. Recording a sound or voice 1 Tap > > . 2 Tap to begin recording. 3 Tap to end the recording. 4 Tap to listen to the recording. NOTE: Tap to access your recordings. You can listen to the saved recording. The available recording time may differ from actual recording time. Tasks You can add your tasks in the Tasks app and synchronize with you MS Exchange account (if supported by your MS Exchange account).
PAGE 170
Voice Search Use this application to search the web using your voice. 1 Tap > > Apps tab (if necessary) > Google folder > . 2 Say a keyword or phrase when Speak now appears on the screen. Select one of the suggested keywords that appear. NOTE: This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Downloads Use this application to see what files have been downloaded through your applications. • Tap > > Apps tab (if necessary) > .
PAGE 171
LG SmartWorld LG SmartWorld offers an assortment of exciting content – fonts, themes, games, applications. How to Get to LG SmartWorld from Your Phone 1 Tap > > Apps tab (if necessary) > . 2 Tap Sign in and enter your user name and password. If you have not signed up yet, tap Register to create an account. 3 Browse and download the content you want. NOTE: • You may incur data fee charges when using your mobile network to access LG SmartWorld.
PAGE 172
Web Browser Internet Use this application to browse the Internet. Browser gives you a fast, full-color world of games, music, news, sports, entertainment and much more, right on your mobile phone. NOTE: Additional charges apply when connecting to these services and downloading content. Check data charges with your network provider. • Tap > > Apps tab (if necessary) > . Using the Browser toolbar Scroll towards the top of the webpage to access the browser toolbar. Tap to go back one page.
PAGE 173
Opening a page To go to a new page, tap > To go to another webpage, tap . , scroll up or down, and tap the page to select it. Searching the web by voice In the browser, tap the address field and then tap . When prompted, say a keyword and select one of the suggested keywords that appear. NOTE: This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Bookmarks To bookmark the current webpage, tap > Add to bookmarks > OK. To open a bookmarked webpage, tap and select the desired one.
PAGE 174
Chrome Use Chrome to search for information and browse webpages. • Tap > > Apps tab (if necessary) > . NOTE: This application may not be available, depending on your region and service provider. Viewing webpages In the Chrome browser, tap the address field, and then enter a web address or search criteria. Opening a page To open a new page, tab > New tab. To go to another webpage, tap , and tap the page to select it.
PAGE 175
Settings This section provides an overview of items you can change using your phone’s System Settings menus. Accessing the Settings menu: • Tap > touch and hold > System settings. - or • Tap > > Apps tab (if necessary) > . Networks < WIRELESS NETWORKS > Wi-Fi Allows you to manage your Wi-Fi connections and connect to available Wi-Fi networks. Bluetooth Allows you to manage your the Bluetooth wireless feature. Mobile data Displays the data usage and allows you to set a personalized mobile data usage limit.
PAGE 176
Incoming voice call pop-up – Displays a pop-up for an incoming call when an app is in use. • Call reject – Allows you to set the call decline function. • Decline with message – When you want to decline a call, you can send a quick message using this function. This is useful if you need to decline a call during a meeting. • Call forwarding – Allows you to choose when to forward calls. • Auto answer – Sets the time before a connected hands-free device automatically answers an incoming call.
PAGE 177
Android Beam – When this feature is turned on, you can transfer app content to another NFC-capable device by holding the devices close together. Just bring the device together (typically back to back) and then tap your screen. The app determines what gets beamed. • SmartShare Beam – Allows you to receive multimedia content via LG phones and tablets. • Media server – Share media content with nearby devices via DLNA.
PAGE 178
Sound < BASIC > Sound profile Allows you to set your phone's sound profile. Choose from Sound, Vibrate only or Do not disturb. Volume Adjust the phone’s volume settings to suit your needs and environment. Vibration strength Allows you to set the vibration strength for calls, notifications and touch feedback. < RINGTONES & VIBRATIONS > Ringtone Allows you to set the ringtones for calls. You can also add a ringtone by tapping the upper-right corner of the screen.
PAGE 179
Lock screen Allows you to choose if you want to show or hide notifications on the lock screen. Apps Allows you to prevent apps from displaying notifications or set apps to show notifications with priority when Do not disturb is set to Priority only. < ADVANCED SETTINGS > Vibrate on tap Checkmark to vibrate when tapping the Home touch buttons and during other UI interactions. Sound effects Tap to set the dial pad touch tones, touch sounds and screen lock sound.
PAGE 180
Theme – Sets the screen theme for your device. You can download new themes from LG SmartWorld. • Wallpaper – Sets the wallpaper to use on your Home screen. • Screen swipe effect – Choose the desired type of effect to display when you swipe from one Home screen canvas to the next. • Allow Home screen looping – Displays the first screen after the last screen when scrolling the Home screen. • Home backup & restore – You can backup and restore app/widget layouts and the Home screen wallpaper.
PAGE 181
Lock timer – Sets the amount of time before the screen automatically locks after the screen has timed out. • Power button instantly locks – Checkmark to instantly lock the screen when the Power/Lock Button is pressed. This setting overrides the Security lock timer setting. • Home touch buttons Set the Home touch buttons displayed at the bottom of all screens. Set which keys are displayed, their position on the bar and what they look like.
PAGE 182
< ADVANCED SETTINGS > Screen-off effect Select the screen-off effect when locking and turning off the screen. Choose from Black hole, Retro TV and Fade out. Daydream Tap the Daydream switch to toggle it On or Off. On allows to set a screensaver to be displayed when the phone is sleeping while docked and/or charging. Auto-adjust screen tone Checkmark to adjust the screen brightness automatically with an analysis of image color.
PAGE 183
Location Allows you to manage locations services to determine your approximate location using GPS, Wi-Fi and mobile networks. • Mode – Allows you to choose a location mode from High accuracy (GPS and networks), Battery saving (Networks only) and Device sensors only (GPS only). • Camera – Checkmark to tag photos or videos with the location they were taken at. • Google Location Reporting – Allows you to view and manage your Google location settings.
PAGE 184
Lock screen – Checkmark to enable you move the PIN Lock screen keypad to the right or left side of the phone. Simply tap the arrow to move it to one side or the other. • Help – Displays information regarding one-handed operation. • Shortcut key Get quick access to apps by pressing and holding the Volume button when the screen is off or locked. Tap the Shortcut key switch (Shortcut key switch image) in the upperright corner of the screen to toggle it On or Off.
PAGE 185
• Screen pin – This feature allows you to lock your device so that the current user can only access the pinned app. This is useful for users with children. < SMART FUNCTIONS > Gestures • Answer an incoming call – Checkmark to enable you to bring the phone to your ear to automatically answer the incoming call. • Fade out ringtone – Checkmark to allow you to pick up the phone from the flat surface to fade out the incoming call ringtone.
PAGE 186
< PHONE MANAGEMENT > Date & time Use the Date & time settings to set how dates will be displayed. You can also use these settings to set your own time and time zone rather than obtaining the current time from the mobile network. Storage • INTERNAL STORAGE – View internal storage usage. Battery • BATTERY INFORMATION – The Battery charge information is displayed on a battery graphic along with the percentage of the remaining charge and its status.
PAGE 187
Default message app This menu allows you to set your default messaging app as desired. Backup & reset This menu allows you to back-up your data, automatically restore data, and erase all the data on your phone. • Backup my data – Allows you to back up your settings and application data to the Google server. • Backup account – Allows you to back up your account. • Automatic restore – Allows you to restore your settings and application data when the applications are reinstalled onto your device.
PAGE 188
PC software (LG PC Suite) For Windows OS LG PC Suite helps you manage media contents and applications in your phone by allowing you to connect to your phone with your PC. With the LG PC Suite software, you can... • Manage and play your media contents (music, movie, pictures) on your PC. • Send multimedia contents to your device. • Synchronizes data (schedules, contacts, bookmarks) in your device and PC. • Backup the applications in your device. • Update the software in your device.
PAGE 189
System Requirements for LG PC Suite software • OS: Windows XP (Service pack 3) 32bit, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8 • CPU: 1 GHz or higher processors • Memory: 512 MB or higher RAMs • Graphic card: 1024 x 768 resolution, 32 bit color or higher • HDD: 500 MB or more free hard disk space (More free hard disk space may be needed depending on the volume of data stored.) • Required software: LG United drivers, Windows Media Player 10 or later.
PAGE 190
Installing the LG PC Suite Software To download the LG PC Suite software, please do the following: 1 Go to www.lg.com. 2 Go to SUPPORT > MOBILE SUPPORT > PC Sync. 3 Select the model information and click GO. 4 Scroll down, select the PC SYNC tab > Mac OS > DOWNLOAD to download LG PC Suite. System Requirements for LG PC Suite software • OS: Mac OS X (10.6.
PAGE 191
Phone software update Phone software update Software updates from the Internet for your LG phone For more information about software updates, please visit http://www.lg.com/common/ index.jsp. This feature allows you to conveniently update the firmware on your phone to a newer version from the Internet without needing to visit a service center. This feature will only be available if and when LG makes a newer firmware version available for your device.
PAGE 192
NOTE: Your personal data saved to the internal phone memory—including information about your Google account and any other accounts, your system/ application data and settings, any downloaded applications and your DRM licence—may be lost in the process of updating your phone's software. Therefore, LG recommends that you backup your personal data before updating your phone's software. LG does not take responsibility for any loss of personal data.
PAGE 193
About this user guide About this user guide Before using your device, please carefully read this guide. This ensures that you use your phone safely and correctly. • Some of the images and screenshots provided in this guide may appear differently on your phone. • Your content may differ from the final product or from software supplied by service providers or carriers. This content is subject to change without prior notice. For the latest version of this guide, please visit the LG website at www.lg.com.
PAGE 194
Trademarks • • LG and the LG logo are registered trademarks of LG Electronics. All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners. DivX HD This DivX Certified® device has passed rigorous testing to ensure it plays DivX® video. To play purchased DivX movies, first register your device at vod.divx.com. Find your registration code in the DivX VOD section of your device setup menu. DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content.
PAGE 195
Accessories These accessories are available for use with the your phone. (Items described below may be optional.) • Travel adaptor • Quick Start Guide • Stereo headset • USB cable NOTE: • Always use genuine LG accessories. The supplied items are designed only for this device and may not be compatible with other devices. • The items supplied with the device and any available accessories may vary depending on the region or service provider.
PAGE 196
Troubleshooting This chapter lists some problems you might encounter when using your phone. Some problems require you to call your service provider, but most are easy to fix yourself. Message SIM or USIM card error No network connection/ Dropped network Codes do not match Possible causes Possible corrective measures There is no SIM or USIM card in the phone or it is inserted incorrectly. Make sure that the SIM card is correctly inserted. Signal is weak or you are outside the carrier network.
PAGE 197
Message Possible causes No applications can be set Not supported by service provider or registration required. Contact your service provider. Dialing error New network not authorized. New SIM or USIM card inserted. Check for new restrictions. Pre-paid charge limit reached. Contact service provider or reset limit with PIN2. On/Off key pressed too briefly. Press the On/Off key for at least two seconds. Battery is not charged. Charge battery. Check the charging indicator on the display.
PAGE 198
Message Possible corrective measures Battery is not charged. Charge battery. Outside temperature is too hot or cold. Make sure phone is charging at a normal temperature. Contact problem Check the charger and its connection to the phone. No voltage Plug the charger into a different outlet. Charger defective Replace the charger. Wrong charger Use only original LG accessories. Number not allowed. The Fixed dialing number function is on. Check the Settings menu and turn the function off.
PAGE 199
Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures The screen does not turn on when I receive a call. Proximity sensor problem If you use a protection tape or case, make sure it has not covered the area around the proximity sensor. Make sure that the area around the proximity sensor is clean. No sound Vibration mode Check the settings status in the sound menu to make sure you are not in vibration or silent mode.
PAGE 200
FAQ Category Question Answer Bluetooth Devices What are the functions available via Bluetooth? You can connect a Bluetooth audio device, such as a Stereo/Mono headset or car kit. Contacts Backup How can I back up Contacts? Contacts data can be synchronized between your phone and Gmail™. Is it possible to set up Synchronization one-way sync with Gmail? Only two-way synchronization is available. The Inbox is automatically synchronized.
PAGE 201
Category Question My phone does not display the time of Message receipt for messages Time older than 24 hrs. How can I change this? Is it possible to install another navigation Navigation application on my phone? Is it possible to synchronize my Synchronization contacts from all my email accounts? Wait and Pause Security FAQ Answer You will only be able to see the times for messages received the same day.
PAGE 202
Category Unlock Pattern 100 Question How do I create the Unlock Pattern? Answer 1. From the Home screen, tap and hold . 2. Tap System settings > Display tab > Lock screen. 3. Tap Select screen lock > Pattern. The first time you do this, a short tutorial about creating an Unlock Pattern appears. 4. Set up your pattern by drawing itthen drawing it a second time for confirmation. Precautions to take when using the pattern lock. It is very important to remember the unlock pattern you set.
PAGE 203
Category Question Answer Unlock Pattern What should I do if I forget the unlock pattern and I did not create my Google account on the phone? If you forgot your pattern: If you logged into your Google account on the phone but failed to enter the correct pattern 5 times, tap the Forgot pattern button. You are then required to log in with your Google account to unlock your phone. If you have not created a Google account on the phone or you have forgotten it, you must perform a hard reset.
PAGE 204
Category Question Answer 1. From the Home screen, tap and My screen turns off hold . after only 15 seconds. 2. Tap System settings > Display tab. Screen time How can I change the out 3. Tap Screen timeout. amount of time for the 4. Tap the preferred screen backlight backlight to turn off? timeout time. When using data, your phone may default to the Wi-Fi connection (if Wi-Fi connectivity on your phone is set to When the Wi-Fi and On).
PAGE 205
Category Charger Alarm Alarm Alarm Display Hard Reset (Factory Reset) FAQ Question Answer Is it possible to charge my phone using a Yes, the phone is charged through the USB cable without USB cable regardless of whether the installing the necessary necessary drivers are installed. USB driver? Yes. After saving a music file as a ringtone, you can use it as an alarm. 1. Touch and hold a song in a library Can I use music files list.
PAGE 206
PAGE 207
PAGE 208